2007 Acura TSX Online Reference Owner's Manualtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0707OM/enu/TS0707OM.… · 2007 Acura TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and

2007 Acura TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................3 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 59 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 159 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 229What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 241 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 271 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 319 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 343 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 359A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 363 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe TSX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Acura TSX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devicesrecord front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbagsystem component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legallyrequired or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked tothe vehicle owner.

WARNING:

Introduction

ii

－

－－

－

－－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

(P.142)

(P.146)

(P.147)

(P.160)

(P.170)

Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

(P.135)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER(P.151)

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAGDRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAGGAUGES(P.68)

MIRROR CONTROLS

(P.9, 26) (P.9, 33)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

(P.130)

(P.246)

(P.244)

(P.129)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE (P.232)

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASELEVER (P.231)

(P.62)

＊

＊

＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.1 :2 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

MOONROOFSWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P. 204)


(P. 150)

(P. 200)

(P. 137)

HORNHANDSFREELINK BUTTONS/VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 212)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P. 33)

(P. 121-122) (P. 123)(P. 120)

(P. 124)

(P. 124)

(P. 71, 72)

(P. 125)

(P. 263)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

1TM

2

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 16.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 19

..Seat Belt System Components . 19

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 21...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 23

......Airbag System Components . 23How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 26...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 31

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 33.............................Airbag Service . 34

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 36All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 36All Children Should Sit in a

.................................Back Seat . 37

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 37

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 39

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 39

...Additional Safety Precautions . 40Protecting Infants and

.........................Small Children . 41.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.........Protecting Small Children . 42.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 44....................Installing a Child Seat . 45

Installing a Child Seat............................with LATCH . 46

......with a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 48...........................with a Tether . 49

...........Protecting Larger Children . 51...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51

..................Using a Booster Seat . 52When Can a Larger Child Sit

....................................in Front . 53...Additional Safety Precautions . 54

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55...................................Safety Labels . 56

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

15

36 54

310

Important Safety Precautions

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)(8)

(9)

(6)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Seat Belts


What You Should Do:

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).26 31

30


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.


What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’message will come on.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door and trunkopen monitor on the multi-information display to indicate whena specific door or the trunk is nottightly closed. You will see theappropriate light/lights and themessage for each condition.

36 40

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

129

Adjust the Front Seats2.


12

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).125

138

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

139

138

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

19

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


16

RELEASE BUTTONS

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.


18

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

78

28 29

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

15

48


Lap/Shoulder Belt

20

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

do not deploy


Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a limited warranty onseat belts. See your

booklet for details.

306

Acura WarrantyInformation


Seat Belt Maintenance

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(1)

(3)

(4)(5)

(8)

(7)(10)

(9)

(6)(4)

(8)

(10)

(5)

(14)

(13)

(14)

(13)

(15)

(11)(2) (7) (12)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(14) Side Curtain Airbags

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal thecontrol unit to turn the airbagoff (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensorthat monitors the distance ofthe seat from the front airbag. Ifthe seat is too far forward, theairbag will inflate with less force(see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latchedor unlatched (see page ).

26

30

31

21

28

19

30


24

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that monitor the weighton the front passenger’s seat. Ifthe weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg)or less (the weight of an infant orsmall child), the passenger’s frontairbag will be turned off (see page

).

32

32

33

28


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

28


How Your Front Airbags Work

26

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED


Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

is latched

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

Advanced Airbags


28

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

33

306


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if thesensors in the seat detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

How Your Side Airbags Work


Side Airbag Cutoff System

30

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

32


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

64

83

82


How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

32

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Any object, such as a folded-downback seat, that is touching the rearof the seat-back.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Airbag Service


34

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

－－

－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

41 5051 54

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

36

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

33

51

CONTINUED

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


38

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

－

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

51

12

15

16

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

136

4948

130

Additional Safety Precautions

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.


40

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type


42

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

33

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

1.

2.

3.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Selecting Child Seats

44

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

1.

2.

3.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


46

Rigid type

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

4.

5.

6.

7.

139


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type ANCHOR

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


48

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

COVERANCHOR

ANCHORAGE POINTS

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

48 48

Using the Center AnchorUsing an Outer Anchor


50

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORANCHOR

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

4.

5.

3.

44

Using a Booster Seat


52

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

5115

CONTINUED

Physical Size

Maturity


When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Additional Safety Precautions


54

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

56

DASHBOARD

HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

DOORJAMBSSUN VISORS

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 68

.............Multi-Information Display . 69Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 119Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 120.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 121

.................................Fog Lights . 122Automatic Lighting Off

.......................................Feature . 122..............Daytime Running Lights . 122

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 123............................Hazard Warning . 124

...............Rear Window Defogger . 124........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 125

.............................Keys and Locks . 126......................Immobilizer System . 127

..............................Ignition Switch . 128....................................Door Locks . 129

................Childproof Door Locks . 130.....................Remote Transmitter . 131

..............................................Trunk . 135......Emergency Trunk Opener . 136

...................Trunk Main Switch . 136..................................Seat Heaters . 137

...............................................Seats . 138...........Power Seat Adjustment . 138.........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 139

........................Head Restraints . 139.....................Folding Rear Seat . 140

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 142

...........................................Mirrors . 145..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 146

..............Power Mirror Heaters . 146............................Power Windows . 147

.......................................Moonroof . 150...............................Parking Brake . 151

........................................Sun Visor . 152................................Vanity Mirror . 152...............................Interior Lights . 153

.........Interior Convenience Items . 155.....................Beverage Holders . 156

........Accessory Power Sockets . 156.............Console Compartment . 157

....................Sunglasses Holder . 158..................................Glove Box . 158

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

Control Locations

60

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

AUDIO SYSTEM

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM


(P.142)

(P.147)

(P.151)

(P.160)

(P.170)

(P.145)GAUGES(P.68)

MIRRORS CONTROLS(P.146)

(P.62)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH(P.129)

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASELEVER

(P.232)

(P.244)

(P.246)

(P.135)

(P.231)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

LOW FUELINDICATOR

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.65)

(P.66)IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.67)

(P.69)

SYSTEM MESSAGEINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

(P.66) LOW TIREPRESSUREINDICATOR

(P.19, 62)

(P.32, 64)

(P.63)

(P.64)

(P.32, 63)

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATORMALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

(P.65, 255)

(P.63, 334)

(P.62, 332)(P.67, 257)(P.62, 332)

(P.62, 331)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you and yourfront passenger have not fastenedyour seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged, and you will also seea ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ). For more information, seepage .

78

19

331

82

84332

84332

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Charging SystemIndicator

62

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the rearbrakes, axles, and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. You will also see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , ). Formore information, see page .

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, sidecurtain airbags, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. You will also see a‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

1.

2.

78

79

32

84334

83


Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. You will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have a properly-coded ignition key. If it is not aproperly-coded key, the indicator willblink and the engine will not start(see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).Take your vehicle to a dealer to haveit checked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal driving ability,but will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. For moreinformation, see page .

3282

127

82

262

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator


64

U.S. Canada

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signals blink. Allturn signals on the outside of thevehicle should flash.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With this indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock function. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

1.

2.

3.

262

82

262

83255

302300


Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

VSA Activation Indicator Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. You will also see a‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).When the indicator comes on, thereis about 2.3 U.S. gal (8.6 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

75

204

121

122

122

71

81


Fog Light Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Low Fuel IndicatorHigh Beam Indicator System MessageIndicator

66

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You may see one or more of the lowpressure tire positions displayedalong with this message.

Check the tire pressure monitor onthe multi-information display anddetermine the cause (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe. If it is becauseof a flat tire, replace the flat tire withthe compact spare (see page ),and have the flat tire repaired assoon as possible. If two or more tiresare underinflated, call a professionaltowing service (see page ). Formore information, see page .

203

259

321

341257

259


Security System Indicator Low Tire PressureIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.The needle returns to thebottom after you turn off theignition.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the pointer may rise tothe upper zone. If it reaches the red

(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

329

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

68

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

U.S. Model is shown.

INFO KNOBSELECT/RESET KNOB

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the display shows‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘WelcomeDRIVER 2’’ depending on whichremote transmitter you use. Thedriver’s ‘‘ID’’ is detected by thetransmitter. For more informationabout driver’s ‘‘ID’’, see page .

If you use the key to unlock thedriver’s door, the display only shows‘‘Welcome.’’ This means the systemcannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, youcannot use the customized settingson the multi-information display (seepage ).When you turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) position, thedisplay shows ‘‘Goodbye.’’

There are three types of messages;normal display messages, engine oillife and maintenance messages, andsystem messages.

You can also customize some vehiclecontrol settings to your liking withthe multi-information display and thetwo buttons on the steering wheel(see page ).86

13286

CONTINUED

Normal Display Messages

Multi-Information Display

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

The multi-information displayconsists of two segments; an uppersegment and a lower segment.

In normal display mode, the uppersegment displays trip computer. Thelower segment displays theodometer, Trip A/B, outsidetemperature, and engine oil life andmaintenance message.


70

SECONDARY DISPLAY

LOWER SEGMENT

PRIMARY DISPLAYUPPER SEGMENT

: Press SEL/RESET Button.

: Press INFO Button.

U.S. model is shown

RANGE: The estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank. Thisdistance is estimated from the fueleconomy you received over thelast several miles, so it will varywith changes in speed, traffic, etc.

ELAPSED TIME: The timetraveled since you last reset thetrip computer.

AVG. SPEED: The average speedyou are traveling.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR:You can see the pressure of eachtire in this monitor. If the tirepressure is low on one or moretires, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information,see page .

The primary display always shows itsdefault setting, ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S.models) or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’(Canadian models) even if you pressthe INFO button. It only changes thesecondary display. You cancustomize this setting to your liking(see page ).

The upper segment is divided intotwo displays; primary and secondary.After you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, press the INFObutton on the steering wheel or theINFO knob in the instrument panel.What you last selected appears onthe secondary display of the tripcomputer. Pressing the INFObutton/knob repeatedly changes thedisplay as shown in the example onthe previous page.

Messages in the trip computerinclude:

When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST.L/100 km (Canadianmodels): Your vehicle’s currentfuel mileage.

AVG. FUEL A/AVG. FUEL B:Your vehicle’s average fueleconomy since you last reset theTrip A or Trip B. When you selectTrip B in the lower segment bypressing the SEL/RESET buttonon the steering wheel or select/reset knob in the instrument panel,the AVG. FUEL B appears in thesecondary display.

102

258CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

INFO KNOB INFO BUTTON

You can also change the display bypushing the select/reset knob in theinstrument panel.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

While a trip meter is displayed, youcan change the display between‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘Trip B’’ by pressingthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel, or the select/resetknob in the instrument panel.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton or select/reset knob until thenumber resets to ‘‘0.0.’’ When youreset ‘‘Trip B’’ , ‘‘AVG. FUEL B’’ isalso reset. If you reset ‘‘Trip A’’,‘‘AVG. FUEL A’’ and ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’will be reset at the same time.

In the lower segment, each time youpress the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel, the display changesfrom ‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ to ‘‘Trip A/Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Trip B/Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘EngineOil Life,’’ and then back to the‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ as shown onpage .70


Trip Meter

72

U.S.model is shownSELECT/RESETKNOB

SEL/RESETBUTTON LOWER SEGMENT

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .

96274


Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

U.S.model is shown

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

U.S.model is shown

ENGINE OIL LIFE

When the engine oil life reaches 15 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ and the code for themaintenance items to be performed.

When the engine oil life reaches 5 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ along with the samemaintenance items.

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 %.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

For more information aboutMaintenance Messages, see‘‘ ’’ on page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

272

274


Maintenance Messages

Maintenance Minder

74

U.S.model is shown

CONTINUED

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

When there are several warnings tobe shown, the system switches themessages every 5 seconds.The message is shown until youpush the INFO button.To see the message again, press theINFO button, 5 seconds after thedisplay disappears.


System Messages

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

Here is a table which shows thepossible multi-information displaymessages and where to find furtherinformation on each message.

See page78

See page78

See page78

See page79

See page79

See page79

See page80

See page81

See page81

See page81


76

CONTINUED

See page82

See page82

See page83

See page84

See page82

See page83

See page84

See page122

See page85

See page83

See page84


Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

If the trunk or any door is not closedtightly, the display reminds you toclose the open trunk or the door(s)before you start driving.

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’This message continues, and achime sounds, until you release theparking brake, or the vehicle speedslows down to less than 1.8 mph (3km/h).

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator in the instrument panel, themulti-information display interruptsthe current display and shows‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELT’’ if either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving. This messageremains displayed while the vehicleis moving until you or yourpassenger’s seat belts are fastened.


Fasten Seat Belt Door and Trunk Open Release Parking Lever

78

U.S. Canada

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door, you will see‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ on the display andhear a reminder beeper.

If the brake fluid level is at or belowthe MIN mark on the side of thebrake fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW.’’ If you see thismessage, have the brake systemchecked by your dealer (see page

).

If the fuel fill cap is missing or nottightened properly, you will see‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP.’’ Make surethe fuel cap is installed and tightenedat least one click.

296

CONTINUED


Remove Key Brake Fluid Low Tighten Fuel Cap

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

U.S. Canada

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days ofnormal driving once you tighten orreplace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

If there is a problem in the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),you will see ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay. If you see this message, theTPMS is not monitoring tirepressures. Have the TPMS checkedby your dealer as soon as possible(see page ).

332

260


Check TPMS System

80

If the fluid level in the windshieldwasher reservoir gets low, you willsee ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ on themulti-information display.

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’on the multi-information display, andyou must refuel soon. The low fuelindicator on the instrument panel willalso come on.

If one or more of your vehicle tiresare low on pressure, you will see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the display. See page

for more information on the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS).259

Canadian models only

CONTINUED

Washer Fluid LowFuel LowCheck Tire Pressure


Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

If the passenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off, you will see‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’on the multi-information display. Seepage for more information.

If there is a problem with the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, youwill see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ onthe multi-information display. If yousee this message, have the VSAsystem checked by your dealer (seepage ).

If the engine oil is very low or haslost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ on the multi-information display. You will also seethe low oil pressure indicator in theinstrument panel flashing or stayingon. If you see this message, youshould take immediate action sinceserious engine damage is possible.Follow the procedure on page .

32

262

331

Passenger Side Airbag Off Check Engine Oil LevelCheck VSA System


82

U.S. Canada

If there is a problem in the anti-lockbrake system (ABS), you will see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. If you seethis message, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer (see page ).

If there is a problem with theautomatic transmission, you will see‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ on themulti-information display. Avoidrapid acceleration, and have thetransmission checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If there is a problem with your frontairbags, side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, sidecurtain airbags, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors, you will see‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. Take yourvehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible (see page ).32

255

Automatic transmission:

CONTINUED

Check Transmission Check ABS System Check Airbag System


Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

If you see ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay, it means the battery is notbeing charged. See page formore information.

If you see ‘‘CHECK EMISSIONSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay, it means one of the engine’semission systems may have aproblem. Have your vehicle checkedby your dealer (see page ).

If there is a problem with the brakesystem, you will see ‘‘CHECKBRAKE SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information display. The parkingbrake and brake system indicator inthe instrument panel will also comeon. See page for moreinformation.

334332

332

Check Charging System Check Emission System Check Brake System


84

U.S. Canada

Canadian models only This message comes on when youset the cruise control. The CruiseControl indicator in the instrumentpanel will also come on. See page

for information on cruise controloperation.

If there is a problem in the highbeam headlight’s circuit, you will see‘‘CHECK DRL SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. If you seethis message, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls, orvisit the handsfreelink.com website.

You can receive or make phone-callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching your cellphone.

204

217

Check DRL System Cruise Control HandsFreeLink


Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

U.S. model is shown

TM

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure you use your transmitterto unlock the driver’s door.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, press and hold theINFO button for more than 3seconds. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY’’appears on the multi-informationdisplay.

If you use the key to unlock thedriver’s door, the system cannotrecognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, when youtry to enter the customizing mode,

‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWNCUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will bedisplayed, and you cannot customizesome of the settings.

Refer to the table on page to seewhat settings you can customize.

88

Customized Settings


86

DRIVER’SID

To change the settings, stop thevehicle, and make sure to set theparking brake and put thetransmission in Park (A/T) orneutral (M/T). If you try to enter thecustomizing mode while the vehicleis moving, the above messageappears and you cannot change thesettings.

The first customizing menu is:

DEFAULT ALLCHANGE SETTING

Every time you press the INFObutton, the display cycles from‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’ ‘‘DEFAULTALL,’’ ‘‘EXIT’’ and then back to‘‘CHANGE SETTING.’’ Press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ asdescribed on page .

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHANGESETTING,’’ and follow theinstructions on page .

You can also use the select/resetknob in the instrument panel. Turnthe knob to select a setting and pressit to enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes,select ‘‘EXIT,’’ the display returns tonormal display.

90

92

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

AT model MT model

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ° ～＋－～± ° ～＋

＊

LANGUAGESELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUELRESET with REFUELELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION

PRIMARY DISPSELECTION

MEMORY POSITIONLINK

DescriptionChanges the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economyto reset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the trip computer’s main display from itsdefault setting.

Causes the driver’s seat position to a stored inmemory.

Customize GroupMETER SETUP(P.93)

POSITION SETUP(P.104)

Customize Menu Customize SetupENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0 F 5°F3°C 0 C 3°C

ONOFFIGN RESETTRIP A RESETTRIP B RESETINST. FUELAVG. FUELRANGEELAPSED TIMEAVG. SPEEDONOFF

Page94

96

98

100

102

104

: Default setting


88

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

DescriptionChanges how long (in seconds) the interior lightsstay on after you close the doors.

Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lightsstay on after you close the driver’s door.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter when the button is pushed one time.The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A horn will also soundwhen you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for thedoors to relock and the security system to set afteryou unlock but do not open the door.Changes the windshield wiper operation betweentwo settings when the wiper switch is in the INTposition.

Customize Setup15 sec30 sec60 sec0 sec15 sec30 sec60 secDRIVER DOORALL DOORSONOFF

30 sec60 sec90 secWITH VEH SPDINTERMITTENT

Page106

108

111

113

115

117

Customize GroupLIGHTING SETUP(P.106)

DOOR · WINDOWSETUP(P.110)

WIPER SETUP(P.117)

Customize MenuINTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

FRONT WIPER ACTION

: Default setting


Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

If you want to set the customizablevehicle control settings to the defaultsetting, press the INFO button onthe steering wheel until ‘‘DEFAULTALL’’ is displayed.

Press the SEL/RESET button toenter ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’ You canchange the display between‘‘CANCEL,’’ ‘‘OK’’ and ‘‘EXIT’’ eachtime you press the INFO button.

If you want to cancel ‘‘DEFAULTALL,’’ press the SEL/RESET buttonwhile ‘‘CANCEL’’ is shown. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEENTRY.’’

To set the default settings, press theINFO button until the displaychanges as shown above. Press theSEL/RESET button to select‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’

DEFAULT ALL


90

To exit ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ press theINFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’then press the SEL/RESET button.

When ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ iscompleted successfully, you will seethe above display for several seconds,and the display will return to‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’

If ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is not completedsuccessfully, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEENTRY.’’ Repeat the procedure toselect ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’


Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay will start showing the initial‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP.’’ Each timeyou press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown in the nextcolumn. Press the INFO button untilyou see the setup you want tocustomize, and press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUPPOSITION SETUPLIGHTING SETUPDOOR/WINDOW SETUPWIPER SETUP

Change Setting


92

: Press SEL/RESET Button.: Press the INFO Button.

There are five custom settings in theMeter Setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETwith REFUELELAP. TIME RESETCONDITIONPRIMARY DISP SELECTION

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed,press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then, press theINFO button repeatedly. Each timeyou press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting you want to customize,and press the SEL/RESET button.Then follow the proceduresdescribed on the following pages. CONTINUED

Meter Setup


Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

: Press the INFO Button.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’Press the SEL/RESET button againto enter the language selection mode.

There are three selectable languages,English, French, and Spanish. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

Select the language you want bypressing the INFO button, and pressthe SEL/RESET button to enteryour selection.

Language Selection


94


When language selection issuccessfully completed, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor several seconds, then goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to select a languageproperly, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’ Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

All the messages in the multi-information display will be in thelanguage you selected.

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The highlighted number is thecurrent adjustment above or belowthe outside temperature. Press theINFO button repeatedly until theappropriate number appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

If you find that the temperaturereading is always a few degreesbelow or above the actualtemperature, adjust it as describedon the following columns.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button once, and you will see‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ as shown above.

Adjust Outside Temp. Display


96

U.S. model is shown

If you fail to enter the desiredadjustment properly, you will see theabove display for several seconds,then the display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat theadjustment.

To exit ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

When your selection is successfullyentered, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thenthe display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

U.S. model is shown

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The lower segment changesbetween ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each timeyou press the INFO button. Enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

To reset ‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘AVG. FUELA’’ to reset every time you refuelyour vehicle, follow the proceduredescribed from the next column.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETWITH REFUEL’’ in the lowersegment as shown above.

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel


98


If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, then the displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUELWITH REFUEL,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’ is the drivingtime since you last reset the tripcomputer. You can customize thecondition of when to reset the‘‘ELAPSED TIME’’.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘ELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION’’ in the lower segmentas shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The lower segment changesbetween ‘‘IGN RESET,’’ ‘‘TRIP ARESET’’ and ‘‘TRIP B RESET’’ eachtime you press the INFO button.Enter your selection by pressing theSEL/RESET button.

Elap. Time Reset Condition


100



To exit ‘‘ELAP. TIME RESETCONDITION,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. Press the INFO button untilyou see ‘‘PRIMARY DISPSELECTION’’ as shown above.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the primarydisplay of the trip computer alwaysshows ‘‘INST. MPG’’ (U.S. models)or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’ (Canadianmodels) in default setting. You cancustomize this setting to your likingin following procedure.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The lower segment changes from‘‘INST. FUEL,’’ to ‘‘AVG. FUEL,’’ to‘‘RANGE,’’ to ‘‘ELAPSED TIME,’’then to ‘‘AVG. SPEED’’ each timeyou press the INFO button. Enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Primary Disp Selection


102



To exit ‘‘PRIMARY DISPSELECTION,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’


Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF ’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat moves to theposition stored in the memory whenyou open the driver’s door, using theremote transmitter.

Refer to page for setting the seatposition memory. Also refer to page

for remote transmitter use.

142

132

Position Setup Memory Position Link


104

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, then the display goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITIONLINK,’’ press the INFO button untilyou see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET button. The display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

There are two custom settings in theLighting Setup:


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’ To make yourselection, press the SEL/RESETbutton.

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes between‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER.’’ To make yourselection, press the SEL/RESETbutton.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors. You can change thetime that the interior lights fade out.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ as shown above.

Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time


106


When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ thenpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button to display‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’as shown above.


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’

Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired time appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.


Headlight Auto Off Timer


108

The headlights, parking lights,taillights, and license plate lightsturn off after the selected time whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch and close the driver’s door.


To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

There are three custom settings inthe Door · Window Setup:

DOOR LOCK MODEKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENTSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Each time you pressthe INFO button, the displaychanges as shown in the nextcolumn.

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting you want to customize,and press the SEL/RESET button.Then follow the proceduresdescribed on the following pages.

Door · Window Setup


110


While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘DOOR · WINDOWSETUP,’’ press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Thedisplay changes to ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ as shown above.


In default setting, if you push theUNLOCK button once on the remotetransmitter or turn the key clockwisein the driver’s door lock, only thedriver’s door unlocks.

You can select whether only thedriver’s door unlocks or all the doorsunlock in ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE.’’

Select ‘‘DRIVER DOOR’’ or ‘‘ALLDOORS’’ by pressing the INFObutton, and enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

Door Lock Mode


Instruments

andC

ontrols

111



To exit ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


112

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ as shownabove.

Press SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’

Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, the door andtrunk locks are set, and some of theexterior lights flash. If you push theLOCK button (with the securitysystem set) again within 5 seconds,the horn sounds to let you know thesecurity system is working. You cancustomize some of the Keyless Locksettings. You can turn off theacknowledgment horn, and you cancustomize the settings so that theexterior lights to do not flash.

CONTINUED

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment


Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the displaychanges to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT,’’ press theINFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’then press the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


114

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the time changes from ‘‘30sec,’’ to ‘‘60 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘90 sec.’’

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

CONTINUED

Security Relock Timer


Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

Select the desired relock time bypressing the INFO button, and enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.



To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCKTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


116

With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown on themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes from‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ to‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and then to‘‘EXIT.’’

Press the INFO button to select‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown onthe multi-information display, theaction of the windshield wipers canbe changed. To do this, refer to thefollowing procedure.

CONTINUED

Wiper Setup Front Wiper Action


Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

If you set the front wiper action to‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ the front wipersrun intermittently and the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speedwhen the wiper switch is in the‘‘INT’’position. If you set it to‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ the wipers runat regular intervals.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for several

seconds, and then the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


118

＊＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.1 :

2 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS


CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

MOONROOFSWITCH


(P.200)

(P.150)

(P.204)

(P.137)

HORN

(P.212)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH


HANDSFREELINK BUTTONS/VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.33)

(P.121-122) (P.120)

(P.124)

(P.124)

(P.125)

(P.71, 72)

(P.263)

(P.123)INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS1

TM

2

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－－

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wiper speed willincrease to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

To change the ‘‘FRONT WIPERACTION’’ setting, see page .

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

1.2.3.4.5.6.

117

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

120

－－Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the‘‘ ’’position turns on the parkinglights, taillights, instrument panellights, side-marker lights, and rearlicense plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, theLights On indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

CONTINUED

Turn Signal Headlights

Turn Signals and Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

－ To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull it back toreturn to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

You can change this 15 second timerto 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page

).With the headlight switch in the offor position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the door,the lights will turn off after 10minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

66

108

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams

Fog Lights

(Canadian Models)Daytime Running Lights

Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature, Daytime Running Lights

122

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

When the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, thedaytime running lights are off.Follow the procedure in the previouspage to turn them on.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem in the high beam headlight’scircuit. Take your vehicle to a dealerto have it checked.

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

Instrument Panel Brightness

Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

SELECT/RESET KNOB BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

U.S. model is shown

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button comes on to showthe defogger is on. If you do not turnit off, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 35 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signallights and both turn signal indicatorsin the instrument panel to flash. Usethe hazard warning lights if you needto park in a dangerous area nearheavy traffic, or if your vehicle isdisabled.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger

124

Without navigation system With navigation system

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

1.

3.

4.

2.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Your vehicle also comes with tworemote transmitters; see page

for an explanation of how tooperation.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the trunkrelease lever, rear seat trunk access,and glove box locked when you leaveyour vehicle and the valet key at aparking facility.

131

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks

126

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEY(Black)

VALET KEY(Light Gray)

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, you must push thekey in slightly. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignition

switch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

79

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

START (III)

ON (II)

Ignition Switch

128

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. On the driver’sdoor, push the top of the masterdoor lock switch to lock all doors.Push the bottom to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door or all doors (dependingon the ‘‘DOOR LOCK MODE’’setting), insert the key, turn the key,and release it. The remaining doorsunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.To change this setting, see page .

You can open or close the windowsby using the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch andpush the lock tab down or push thetop of the master switch, then closethe door.

149

111

CONTINUED

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

LOCK TAB

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Unlock

LockDRIVER’S DOOR

On the front passenger’s door, pushthe master door lock switch down tolock the all doors, and up to unlockthem.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. If you tryto lock an open driver’s door bypushing in the lock tab, all doors willunlock when you close the driver’sdoor.

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Door Locks, Childproof Door Locks

130

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door or all thedoors (depending on the ‘‘DOORLOCK MODE’’ setting). Press ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button.The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the Door Activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any doors within 30seconds (or whatever setting the‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ is set to), the light fades out.If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light willgo off immediately.

To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

When the key is in the ignitionswitch, the functions of each buttonare disabled.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, you will heara horn (depending on the ‘‘KEYLESSLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’setting) to verify that the doors arelocked and the security system hasset. The Lock button will not work

this way if any door is not fullyclosed.

You can open and close all powerwindows from outside the vehiclewith the key. With the remotetransmitter, you can open thewindows. Refer to Power Windowson page .

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,see page .

149

113

111

CONTINUED

UNLOCK

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

－

－

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ see page .

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany doors within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets. To change thissetting, refer to ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ on page .

Each remote transmitter alsoactivates the Driving PositionMemory System and changes the‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’setting according to that remote (seepage ).

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if the keyis in the ignition switch.

142

106

115

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

PANIC

TRUNK

Remote Transmitter

132

DRIVER 1 REMOTE DRIVER 2 REMOTE

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor 1 second to indicate the featurehas been turned on.

The driving position memoryactivated (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

You can turn off this systemactivation. Press and hold the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at the sametime. The LED in the remotetransmitter will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons. Doing this alsocancels the ‘‘MEMORY POSITIONLINK’’ setting for that remote andrestores the default settings.

Any of these actions will stop thesystem’s automatic seat adjustment:

Pressing either memory button orthe MEMO button on the driver’sdoor.

Pressing any of the seatadjustment switches.

Shifting out of Park (A/T), or intoreverse (M/T).

When you open the driver’s doorafter unlocking it with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep(depending on the ‘‘KEYLESSLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’setting see page ). The driver’sseat will move to the positions storedin the memory locationcorresponding with the remote inuse. You will hear two beeps whenthe seat stops moving.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR2025

113

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

133

－

To replace the battery:

Place a cloth on the edge of thetransmitter, and remove the upperhalf by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the transmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

1.

2.

3.




Remote Transmitter

134

BATTERY

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Give the person the valet key.

You can open the trunk in any ofthree ways:

Pull up on the trunk release leverlocated to the left of the driver’sseat.

Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key. Also make surethe rear seat is not folded down(see page ).

If the doors are unlocked, pressthe trunk release switch on thetrunk lid.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

1.

2.

140

55

239

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

Pull

MASTER KEYTRUNK RELEASE LEVERTRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release switchon the trunk lid by turning off thetrunk main switch in the glove boxand locking the glove box. Makesure the rear seat is not folded down.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

40

Emergency Trunk Opener Trunk Main Switch

Trunk

136

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag off system.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

137


Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeatHEATERS

－ Moves the whole seatup and forward, ordown and backward.The front of the seatalso tilts up or down atthe same time.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Driver’s seat only:

Driver’s seat only:

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 14Driver’s seat only:

Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

138

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle has adjustable headrestraints on the front seats and onthe outside positions of the rear seat.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

14

CONTINUED

Head RestraintsDriver’s Lumbar Support

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you direct access to the trunk.Each side folds down separately.With only half the seat folded, youcan still carry a passenger in theback seat. The seat-back can bereleased from inside the vehicle orinside the trunk.

To fold down either side of the seat-back from inside the vehicle, insertthe master key in the lock on therear shelf. To fold down the driver’sside, turn the key clockwise, pulldown the top of the seat-back, thenrelease the key. To fold down thepassenger’s side, turn the keycounterclockwise and perform thesame procedure.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Seats

Folding Rear Seat

140

MASTER KEY

REAR OUTSIDE POSITION

RELEASE BUTTON

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors to work improperly (seepage ). Also check the passengerairbag off indicator to assure properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in thecenter shoulder belt.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.Push the seat-back down, then let goof the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

28

CONTINUED

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

141

RELEASE LOOPCENTER SHOULDER BELT

GUIDE

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat position.

Two seat positions can be stored inseparate memories. You select amemorized position by pushing theappropriate button or appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

This setting can be linked orunlinked with the remote transmitter.To customize the setting ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’, see page .

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

1.

2.138104

238

55

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driving Position Memory System

Seats, Driving Position Memory System

142

CONTINUED

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the parking brake is set(M/T) or the shift lever is in Park(A/T).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

Pressing the MEMO button againwithin 5 seconds.

Press and release the MEMObutton on the driver’s door. Youwill hear a beep. Then, bothindicators in the memory buttonswill start to blink. Press and holdone of the memory buttons (1 or2) within 5 seconds after you pressthe MEMO button. When thesystem completes storing a newdriving position, you hear twobeeps. The indicator in the storedmemory button will come on.

1.

2.

3.


Selecting a Memorized Position

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

MEMORY BUTTONSMEMORY BUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

INDICATORS

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change theseat position after it is in itsmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this seat position forlater use, you must store it in thedriver’s seat position memory.

Pressing any of the seatadjustment switches.

Shifting out of Park (A/T), or intoreverse (M/T).

Any of these actions will stop thesystem’s automatic seat adjustment:

The system will move the driver’sseat to the memorized position. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustment is complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will stay on.

Pressing either memory button orthe MEMO button on the driver’sdoor.

You cannot select a memorizedposition if the transmission is inreverse. Shift to another gear,then select a position.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

Notes for vehicles with M/T


144

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

145

AUTO BUTTON

INDICATOR

SENSOR

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

3.

2.

4.

Power Mirror HeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

146

ADJUSTMENT KNOB HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

－ To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.If the MAIN switch is pushed down

(OFF), the passenger windowscannot be raised or lowered. Keepthe MAIN switch off when you havechildren in the vehicle so they do notinjure themselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating any ofthe window switches. To open awindow, push the switch down andhold it. To close the window, pull theswitch up and hold it. Release theswitch to stop the window.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－ If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthe AUTO function is disabled, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again before you can raiseor lower the windows.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

148

To open:

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door(depending on the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting).

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again (within 10seconds).

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

1.

2.

3.1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

4.

Power Windows

Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper part of theswitch ( ). To open themoonroof, press and hold the lowerpart of the switch ( ). Releasethe switch when the moonroof getsto the desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position tooperate the moonroof.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

Moonroof

150

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

78

63

Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is put into gear with theparking brake on.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The lights come on when you pull upthe cover.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

152

The rear ceiling light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In theDoor Activated position, the ceilinglight comes on when you open anydoor. After all doors are closedtightly, the light fades out in about30 seconds. In the ON position, theceiling light stays on continuously.

The front ceiling lights have a two-position switch. In the DoorActivated position, the lights comeon when you open any door. In theOFF position, the lights do not comeon.

In the Door Activated position, thelight comes on when you:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Open any door.Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.Unlock the doors with the key,lock tab on the driver’s door,master door lock switch, orremote transmitter.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after 3minutes.

Turn on the front ceiling lights bypushing the lens. Push the lens againto turn if off. You can use theselights at all times.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ see page .106

Ceiling Light

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

Front

Rear

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the select/resetknob on the instrument panel.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door,remove key from the ignition switch,or unlock the driver’s door.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ see page .106

Courtesy Light Individual Interior Lights

Interior Lights

154

COURTESY LIGHT

CONTINUED

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

GLOVE BOX

CENTER ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDERS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET/BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

UTILITY POCKET/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CENTER POCKET

TRUNK

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets


156

Front Rear

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The tray in the console compartmenthas a coin holder.

Console Compartment


Instruments

andC

ontrols

157

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Sunglasses Holder Glove Box


158

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

...............Climate Control System . 160................Automatic Operation . 162

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 163..........Dual Temperature Control . 167

..............Climate Control Sensors . 169..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 170

.....................Adjusting the Sound . 175............AM/FM Radio Reception . 177

Playing the XM Satellite..........................................Radio . 179

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 184.................................Playing Discs . 185

.....CD Changer Error Messages . 193.....................Protecting your CDs . 194

...............................Playing a Tape . 195.............Steering Wheel Controls . 200

.................Radio Theft Protection . 201..........................Setting the Clock . 202

............................Security System . 203...............................Cruise Control . 204

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 207

..........................HandsFreeLink . 211

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

Features

Features

159

TM

Climate Control System

160

FAN CONTROL BAR

MODE BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR


RECIRCULATION BUTTON

A/C BUTTON

Without navigation system

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BAR

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BAR

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

CONTINUED


Features

161

AUTO BUTTON

MODE ICONS

DUAL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON


RECIRCULATION BUTTON

FAN CONTROL ICONS

A/C ICONS

With navigation system





A/C BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

▲ ▼

Proper use of the climate controlsystem can make the interior dryand comfortable, and keep thewindows clear for best visibility.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

You can adjust the temperatures ofthe driver’s side and the passenger’sside independently (see page ).

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button. You willsee AUTO in the display.

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See theNavigation section in your QuickStart Guide for an overview of thissystem and the Navigation Systemmanual for complete details.

Set the desired temperature bypushing or on the driver’sside temperature control bar. Theselected temperature will show inthe upper display.

167

1.

2.

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

Automatic OperationVoice Control System


162

▲ ▼




In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver andpassenger. If the driver’s side of thevehicle is getting too much sun, thesystem will adjust to a lowertemperature.

Press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

When you push the passenger’s sidetemperature control bar, theindicator in the DUAL button comeson and the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslowest limit ( ) or its highestlimit ( ), the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in the AUTO mode.All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

Press the A/C button to view theA/C manual control display.Making any manual selection causesthe indicator in the AUTO button toturn off.

Set the desired temperature bypushing or on the driver’sside temperature control bar. Theselected temperature will show inthe upper display.

2.

1.

167

Semi-automatic Operation


Features

163

▼▲▼▲





Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control bar ( or ).The fan speed is represented byvertical bars in the display.

Press the A/C button to view theA/C manual control display. Touchthe fan control icons to the desiredspeed.

To adjust the desired temperature,push or on thetemperature control bar.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ). The indicator in theDUAL button comes on.

When you press the DUAL buttonagain (indicator turns off), both sidetemperature is adjusted by turningthe driver’s side temperature dial.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

Press the A/C button to view theA/C manual control display.Touching ON or OFF icon in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

167

Fan Control Temperature Control

Dual Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/Icons


164

This button turns the windshielddefrost on and off.

When you push this button, air flowsfrom the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield, and the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Whenthe indicator in the button is on, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).124

Windshield Defroster Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Recirculation Button


Features

165

Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air flows from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Press the A/C button to view theA/C manual control display, thentouch any of the mode icons on thedisplay.

When the climate control system isturned off, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.On vehicles with navigation system


Mode Control To Turn Everything Off


166

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol bars, one for the driver, andone for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these bars when thegreen indicator in the DUAL buttonis lit.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then press the temperature controlbars ( or side) on the driver’sside. To set the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s,press the temperature control bars( or side) on the passenger’sside. You can adjust the passenger’sside without pressing the DUALbutton first.

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Bars

Features

167





DUAL BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON





▲ ▼

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the upperdisplay. For vehicles with navigationsystem when the indicator in theDUAL button is off, you can adjustboth sides to the same temperatureby adjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control bar ( orside).

Dual Temperature Control

168

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Climate Control Sensors

Features

169

TEMPERATURE SENSORSUNLIGHT SENSOR

Playing the AM/FM Radio

170

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

A. SEL BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS


TUNE/SOUND KNOB

U.S. model is shown.

VOL/PWR KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR


Features

171

PRESET ICONS

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

UPPER DISPLAY

SCAN ICON

SOUND ICON

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

A.SEL ICON



VOL/PWR KNOB

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, thepreset buttons or icons, and AUTOSELECT.

Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the FM/AMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

XM satellite radio information isavailable on page .

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated using the voicecontrol system. See the Navi sectionin your Quick Start Guide for anoverview of this system, and theNavigation System manual forcomplete details.

Use the TUNE/SOUNDknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Turn the knob right totune to a higher frequency, and turnthe knob left to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the VOL/PWR knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar, then release it.

179



On U.S. models


To Select a StationTo Play the AM/FM RadioVoice Control System

TUNE

SEEK

172

－－

－

CONTINUED

The preset frequencies may be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe button or icon and hold it untilyou hear a beep.

Each preset button or iconcan store one frequency on AM, andtwo frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton or icon.

To use the SCAN, preset and A.SELfunction, press the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton to view these icons.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button, ortouch the SCAN icon (models withnavigation system), then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button or touch theSCAN icon again.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3.

4.1.

2.



Preset

SCAN

Features

173

－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons or icons. Use the TUNE,SEEK, or SCAN function to findstations, then store them in thepreset buttons or icons as describedpreviously.

Press the A. SEL button or touch theA. SEL icon. A. SEL will appear inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It stores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbuttons (1 6) or icons. You willsee a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing apreset button or icon if Auto Selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset button or icon.

press theA.SEL button or touch the A.SELicon. This restores the presets youoriginally set.

To turn off Auto Select,

AUTO SELECT


174

－

－

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio or CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button and thenpush the TUNE/SOUND knob ortouch the SOUND icon in the display.The current setting is shown on thedisplay.

You select which of these you wantto adjust by pressing the TUNE/SOUND knob. The mode changesfrom BASS to TREBLE to FADER toBALANCE, and then back to theselected audio mode, each time youpress the knob. Turn the knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the display.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

On vehicles without navigation system On vehicles with navigation system

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Features

175

＋－

You select which of these you wantto adjust by pressing the TUNE/SOUND knob. The mode changesfrom BASS to TREBLE to FADER toBALANCE, and then back to theselected audio mode, each time youpress the button. You can also selectthe mode by touching theadjustment bar on the displaydirectly.

To adjust the TREBLE and BASS,touch or on each side of theTREBLE or BASS adjustment bar.The adjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

The Left/Right BALANCE adjuststhe side-to-side strength, whileFront/Rear FADER adjust the front-to-back strength. To adjust the Left/Right BALANCE, touch the ‘‘L’’ or‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust the Front/RearFADER, touch the ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Adjusting the Sound

176

ADJUSTMENT BARS

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

177

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

178

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.XM is a registered trade mark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionsin the audio display.

U.S. Models onlySatellite Digital Radio

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Features

179

SCANBUTTONTUNE/

SOUNDKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODEINDICATOR

MODEICON

SCANICON

UPPER DISPLAY

SOUNDICON

XM BUTTON

XM BUTTON

without navigation system with navigation system

SEEK/SKIPCATEGORY BAR

DISP/MODE BUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

VOL/PWRKNOB

VOL/PWRKNOB

PRESET ICONS

SEEK/SKIPCATEGORY BAR

－

－

－

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes. Onmodels with navigation system,touch the MODE icon on the display.In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

Each time you press andrelease the DISP/MODE button, thedisplay changes in the followingsequence: Channel name, category,artist name, and music title.

To operate the XM Radio, Press theAUDIO DISPLAY button to view theXM Radio control display.

To listen to the XM satellite Radio,turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Push the VOL/PWR knob to turn onthe audio system, and press the XMbutton. Adjust the volume turningthe VOL/PWR knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show inthe display.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of four methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), SCAN, and thepreset bars.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

On vehicles without navigation systemOn vehicles with navigation system


Operating the XM Radio MODE

DISP

To Select a Channel

TUNE

180

－－

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset bar or preset icons on thescreen. Each side of the bar storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Pick a preset number (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the bar (icon) until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbar (icon) to tune to it.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

PresetSEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

SCAN


Features

181

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.

Satellite Radio Signals


182

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on an east/west road witha mountain on the south side ofthe road.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.

Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the display.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSAT Radio mode while you awaitactivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear on the displayand you will be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push theVOL/PWR knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the CD/AUX XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com


Receiving Satellite Radio Service

To get your XM Satellite radio IDnumber:

Features

183

Your audio system will acceptauxiliary inputs from a portablecassette player, MP3 player, etc.

To take the system out of AUX mode,press the AM/FM, or CD/AUX orCD/AUX/XM (U.S. models only)button. To return to AUX modewhile the jack is connected, press theCD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.

To use the jack, turn down thevolume of the portable unit, andpivot the cover up, then plug in amini-jack cable between the portableunit and the jack. You will see AUXin the display and the systemautomatically switches to AUX mode.To adjust the volume, turn the VOL/PWR knob.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack

184

Playing Discs

Features

185

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONDISC NUMBER


AM/FM BUTTON

CD BUTTON

TRACK NUMBER

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BUTTONS


Playing Discs

186

CD SLOT

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOAD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

CH DISC BAR


UPPER DISPLAY

DISC SCAN ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON

TRACK SCAN ICON

CH DISC ICONS

SOUND ICON

TRACK RANDOM ICON

DISC REPEAT ICON


TRACK ICON

DISC ICON


CONTINUED

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ onthe display.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redlight starts blinking.

Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ on the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on thedisplay again, insert the next CDin the slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, thesystem begins playing the last CDloaded.

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

For best results when using CD-R orCD-RW discs, use only high qualitydiscs labeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R or CD-RW, therecording must be closed in orderfor the disc to be played by the CDplayer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Loading CDs in the ChangerOperating the CD Changer

Playing Discs

Features

187

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

－－

＋

▲▼

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the disc numberindicator is not highlighted) andpress the appropriate preset bar ortouch a disc icon. The current CDstops playing and starts the loadingsequence. The CD just loaded willplay.

When that CD ends, the next CD inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last CD finishes, thesystem returns to the first CD.

To select a different disc, press anappropriate preset button (1 6) oruse the Preset 5 (DISC ) to selectthe previous disc or Preset 6 (DISC

) to select the next disc insequence. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ onthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected CD in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

Playing Discs

To Play a CD

188

－

－

－

－

－


CONTINUED

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release the

side of the bar to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

The RANDOMfunction plays the tracks within a CDin random order, rather than in theorder they are recorded on the CD.To activate it, press the RDM button.You will see RDM on the display as areminder. The system will then

select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRANDOM by pressing the RDMbutton again.

Press and holdthe RPT button to continuouslyreplay the current CD. You will seeD-RPT on the display as a reminder.Press the button again to turn it off.

To activate the repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT on thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

The available CD functions aredescribed as follows.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded on the CD. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN on the display asa reminder. The system will thenplay the first track for approximately10 seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingtracks for 10 seconds each. When itplays a track that you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN button again.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

Playing Discs

SEEK/SKIP

RANDOM

DISC REPEAT

REPEAT

SCAN

Features

189

－－This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track ofall the discs in the CD changer in theorder they are stored. To activatethe DISC SCAN feature, press andhold the SCAN button. You will seeD-SCAN on the display as areminder. The system will then playthe first track of the first CD forapproximately 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe next CD’s first track. When itplays a disc that you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN button again.

This functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded on the CD. To activate it,touch the TRACK SCAN icon orpress and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN on the left side ofTRACK icon on the display as areminder. SCAN also appears on theupper display. The system will thenplay the first track for approximately10 seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingtracks for 10 seconds each. When itplays a track that you want tocontinue listening to, touch theTRACK SCAN icon or press theSCAN button again.

Press the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the available CD controlicons on the display. The iconfunctions are described as follows.


Playing Discs

DISC SCAN TRACK SCAN

190

－－

－

－This functionsamples the first track of all thediscs in the CD changer in the orderthey are stored. To activate it, touchthe DISC SCAN icon or press andhold the SCAN button. You will seeSCAN on the left side of the DISCicon on the display as a reminder.D-SCAN also appears on the upperdisplay. The system will then playthe first track of the first CD forapproximately 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe next CD’s first track. When itplays a disc that you want tocontinue listening to, touch the DISCSCAN icon or press the SCANbutton again.

Touch theTRACK REPEAT icon tocontinuously replay a track. You willsee REPEAT on the left side of theTRACK icon on the display as areminder. RPT also appears on theupper display. Press the icon again toturn it off.

Touch the DISCREPEAT icon to continuously replaythe current CD. You will seeREPEAT on the left side of the DISCicon. D-RPT also appears on theupper display. Press the icon again toturn it off.

The TRACKRANDOM function plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate it, press theTRACK RANDOM icon. You will seeRANDOM on the left side of theTRACK icon on the display as areminder. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateTRACK RANDOM by touching theTRACK RANDOM icon again.

Playing Discs

DISC SCAN TRACK REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM

Features

191

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM or CD/AUX, orCD/AUX/XM button to switch tothe radio or satellite radio (U.S.models only), or optional tape player(if a tape is loaded) while a CD isplaying. When you return to CDmode by pressing the CD/AUX orCD/AUX/XM button, play willcontinue at the same point that it leftoff.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press and release the eject( ) button. You will see EJECTin the display. When you remove thedisc from the slot, the system beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another CD within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode [AM, FM1, FM2, orXM Radio (U.S. models)].

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button, or theappropriate icon or CH/DISC bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button.

After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio, or with theaudio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject up to 5 discs, one at a time.

If you turn off the system while a CDis playing, either by pushing theVOL/PWR knob or by turning offthe ignition, the CD will stay in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, it will begin at the same discand track.

Playing Discs

To Stop Playing a CD Removing CDs from the Changer

192

Error Message Cause SolutionThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will reappear. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

(with navigation system)

(without navigation system)


(with navigation system)


CD Player Error Messages

Features

193

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

194

Playing a Tape (Optional)

Features

195

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR

REPEAT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR


PRESET BUTTONS


VOL/PWR KNOB


196

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR


SEEK/SKIP BAR

With Navigation SystemUPPER DISPLAY

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT ICON

REW ICON

NR ICON

FF ICON


VOL/PWR KNOB

＊

＊

▲Dolby noise reduction

manufactured under license fromDolby laboratories licensingCorporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof the Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of the tape isplaying. The indicates the sideyou inserted upward is now playing.If you want to play the other side,press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) orpress the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonand touch either or icon.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thePreset 4 (NR) or touching the NRicon. Dolby remains off until youpress the preset button or the iconagain.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/AUX XM button. To change back tothe tape player, push the CD/AUXbutton or CD/AUX XM button.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the VOL/PWR knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape


Features

197

－

－

－

－

－

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward tothe beginning of the next track. Onvehicles without navigation system,you will see FF in the display. Pressand release the side of theSKIP bar to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Onvehicles without navigation system,you will see REW in the display.

To rewind the tape,push the Preset 1 (REW). You willsee REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF). You will see FF displayed.Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 (PLAY/PRG) to take the system out ofrewind or fast forward.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a track orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

To rewind the tape,touch the REW icon. To fast forwardthe tape, touch the FF icon. Presseither or icon to take thesystem out of fast forward or rewind.

Touch the REPEATicon to continuously replay a track.You will see REPEAT displayed. Thetrack will repeat until you touch theREPEAT icon again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display, press thetape eject button to remove the tapefrom the unit. Make sure the tape isnot damaged. If the tape will noteject or the error message stays onafter the tape ejects, take yourvehicle to your dealer.

Press the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the available tape controlicons on the display. The iconfunctions are described as follows.



Tape Search FunctionsSKIP

FF/REW

REPEAT

FF/REW

REPEAT


198

NOTE:

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Caring for the Tape and Player


Features

199

▲ ▼

＋－

＋

－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers on the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (ifequipped). On models with satelliteradio system, you can also selectXM1 and XM2.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

Steering Wheel Controls

200

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

－

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific digit code using thepreset buttons (icon on vehicle’s withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ on thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons (icons on vehicles withnavigation system) to enter the five-digit code. The code is on the radiocode card included in your owner’smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a dealer canaccess your code with your radio’sserial number. To access the serialnumber, turn the radio on. It mustdisplay ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radiooff. Push the preset 1, preset 6, andpower buttons at the same time, thenquickly release.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbuttons (1 6) after the systembegins working. Your originalsettings were lost when power wasdisconnected.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

Radio Theft Protection

Features

201

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Refer to the navigation systemowner’s manual to set up the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

To set or change the time, press andhold the TUNE/SOUND knob untilyou hear a beep. The displayed timebegins to blink. Press on the H(Preset 4) until the numbers advanceto the desired time. Change theminutes by pressing the M (Preset5) until the numbers advance to thedesired time. When you are finished,press the TUNE/SOUND knobagain to set the time. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the time displayed isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe TUNE/SOUND knob, then pressthe R (Preset 6) to set the time backto the previous hour.

If the time displayed is after the halfhour, the same procedure sets thetime forward to the beginning of thenext hour.



Setting the Clock

202

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

R BUTTONM BUTTON

DIGITAL CLOCK

H BUTTON

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. Before you leave thevehicle, make sure the doors, trunk,and hood are securely closed.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds (depending on the‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’setting) after you lock the doors,hood, and trunk. For the system toactivate, you must lock the doorsfrom the outside with the key, locktab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator in the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release handleor the emergency trunk opener.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

Security System

Features

203

NOTE:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push the cruise control masterbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN indicator in theinstrument panel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The ‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’message appears on the multi-information display to show thesystem is now activated.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control

204

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL MESSAGE

RES/ACCELBUTTON

U.S. model is shownSET/DECEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/DECELbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. The‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message onthe multi-information display willcome back on.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. The‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message onthe multi-information display goesout. When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

Features

205

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the cruise control masterbutton.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem remembers the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) then press and releasethe RES/ACCEL button. The‘‘CRUISE CONTROL’’ message onthe multi-information display comeson, and the vehicle accelerates to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the cruise control masterbutton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

206

－

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 2 to 5 inches fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop and

reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote transmitterfor the device (garage door,automatic gate, security system, etc.)has a fresh battery.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink

General Information


Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Features

207

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

209


208

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener is needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


Features

209

TRAINING BUTTON

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

1.

2.

207




Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance


210

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cellphone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoyhands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable in both English and French(Canadian models only). To changethe language, see page .

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

( In Canada, visit) or by calling

the Hands Free Link customersupport at

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the console buttons. On modelswith navigation system, themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

214

226

221

handsfreelink.com.www.acura.ca.

(888) 528-7876.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Phonebook

Microphone

HandsFreeLink

Features

211

TM

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Below theHFL buttons is another set of voicecontrol buttons for the navigation,climate control, and audio systems.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob.

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

HFL ButtonsAudio System

HandsFreeLink

212

HFL BACKBUTTON

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

Vehicle with navigationsystem is shown

TM

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL onthe multi-information display, youwill see this information on thescreen:

All phones may not operateidentically, and some may causeinconsistent operation of the HFL.

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

:

Multi-Information Display How to Use the HFL

HandsFreeLink

Features

213

NOTE:

SIGNALSTRENGTH

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

PHONE DIALING

ROAMSTATUS

HFL MODEMESSAGE

TM

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

To enter a command, press andrelease the Talk button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

Adjust the air flow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

After pressing the Talk button,wait for the beep, then give a voicecommand.

HandsFreeLink

Using Voice Control

214

TM

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

To set up the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Up the System

Features

215

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ or ‘‘An incoming callprompt will be used.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL system response is, ‘‘Wouldyou like the notification to be aring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFLsystem returns to its main menu.Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ringtone or prompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill be mute, and a message willbe displayed.

The HFL response continues ‘‘Asecurity option is available to lockthe HFL. Each time the vehicle isturned on, a passcode would berequired to use this system. Wouldyou like this security option turnedon?’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can setyour passcode. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

Follow the system setupprocedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thefour-digit number you would liketo set as your passcode?’’

4.

5.

4.

1.

2.

3.

6.

To set your passcode, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Your Passcode

216

TM

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, theHFL system response is, ‘‘Securitywill not be used. The system setupis complete.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for yourpasscode each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position and you press the Talkbutton. You will only be asked forthe passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, itsresponse is ‘‘The system is locked.What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If thepasscode is not correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.Please try again.’’ Go back to thestep 2.

If you forget your passcode and youcannot activate the HFL, consultyour dealer to cancel the passcode.

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call theHandsFreeLink customer supportat or call your phoneretailer.During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security is on.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. The system setupis complete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

2.

3.

5.

6.

1.

To enter your passcode, do this;

handsfreelink.com

(888) 528-7876

HandsFreeLink

Pairing Your Phone

Features

217

NOTE:

TM

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

1. 4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

8.

HandsFreeLink

218

NOTE:

TM

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

2.

3.

4.1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

219

TM

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.1.

2.

1.

HandsFreeLink

220

TM

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on the navigationdisplay.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:


CONTINUED

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink

Features

221

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

To send a name during a call, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

222

TM

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from the HFL to thephone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from your phone tothe HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Setting up the Phonebook

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Receiving a Call

HandsFreeLink

Features

223

TM

To add a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’


2.

1.

4.

5.

2.

1.

3.

5.

2.

1.

3.

4.

HandsFreeLink

224

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.3.

1.

4.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

CONTINUED

Clearing the System

HandsFreeLink

Features

225

TM

To change from English to French, dothis:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘La langue a étéchangée. Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Vous avezsélectionné Français. Les nomsenregistrés en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

1.

2.

3.2.

3.

4.

Changing Language(Canadian Models Only)

HandsFreeLink

226

NOTE:

TM

＜＞

＜＞

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like tocontinue?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

4.

1.

2.

3.To change from French to English, dothis:

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

227

NOTE:

TM

＜＞

＜＞

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

4.

HandsFreeLink

228

TM

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 230.................Fuel Recommendation . 230

.........Service Station Procedures . 231....................................Refueling . 231

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 232

...................................Oil Check . 234.............Engine Coolant Check . 234

...............................Fuel Economy . 235...Accessories and Modifications . 236

.............................Carrying Cargo . 238

Before Driving

Before

Driving

229

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead toengine damage.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we strongly

recommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

On vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

230

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

3.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Refueling

Service Station Procedure

Before

Driving

231

FUEL FILL CAP

PushTETHER

ATTACHMENT

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer. To Open the Hood:

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display.

1.

6.

4. 5.

332

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off


Opening and Closing the Hood

232

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot(30 cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.

To Close the Hood:

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thehood.

3.2.


Before

Driving

233

LATCH SUPPORT RODGRIP

CLIP

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

1.

2.

3.

4.

291

282

287

Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Adding Engine Oil


234

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK (orange handle)

LOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages given by the multi-information display. See

on page.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

282

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

235

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

336

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

236

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

Non-Acura wheels can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

237

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Trunk, including the back seatswhen folded down

Center pocket

Console compartment

Door pockets

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

238

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

TRUNK

－ ×Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit:

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.(The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb).

For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

1.

2.

5.

6.

3.

4.

265

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

Before

Driving

239

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page . Be sure items placed on the floor

behind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals or the seat.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the gross vehicle weightrating (GVWR) or the gross axleweight rating (GAWR). Both are ona label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

55

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

Carrying Cargo

240

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 242.......................Starting the Engine . 243

...................Manual Transmission . 244..............Automatic Transmission . 246

...........................................Parking . 253.............................Braking System . 254

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 255Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 257Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 262...........................Towing a Trailer . 264

Driving

Driving

241

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepages and ).

You should do these checks andadjustments before you drive yourvehicle:

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , and

).

11.

6176

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

145

15

146

138

125

310

68

Preparing to Drive

242

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. Returnto step 5 if the engine does notstart.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual transmission:


127

Starting the Engine

Driving

243

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. When shifting upor down, make sure you push theclutch pedal down all the way, shiftto the next gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear. Downshift one gearat a time.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

12 mph (19 km/h)23 mph (37 km/h)34 mph (54 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)56 mph (90 km/h)

Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points

244

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

The 6-speed manual transmissionhas an electric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from fifth toreverse instead of sixth while thevehicle is moving. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped:

Apply the parking brake, and turnthe ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

The engine speed limiter only workswhen you upshift; engine speed isnot limited during downshifts.Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

1.

2.

3.

Manual Transmission

Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Driving

245

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators in the tachometershow which position the shift lever isin.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).To shift from any position, move theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY(I) position.

83

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

246

SHIFT LEVER

－

－－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedaland move the lever.

Move the lever.3

3

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal, and move the shift lever fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toreverse from neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10km/h).

If you cannot shift to reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,and then shift to reverse.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromneutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the right to shift out of Park.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’s

battery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to

on page ).

251

251


Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Shift Lock Release

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Driving

247

－－

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the displayshows the selected gear.

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftmode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

3

3


Sequential SportShift ModeDrive (D )3

248

SELECTED GEAR

→→

→ －－→ －－→ －－

CONTINUED

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 6 mph (10 km/h).

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

The vehicle speeds drops below5 4: 33 mph (52 km/h)4 3: 20 mph (32 km/h)

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will be in firstgear. The transmission will notautomatically upshift. Watch thetachometer and upshift manuallybefore the engine reaches theredline.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

If you press the brake pedal as youdrive downhill.

If you drive uphill between5 4: 45 33 mph(72 52 km/h)4 3: 33 20 mph(52 32 km/h)3 2: 20 10 mph(32 16 km/h)


Driving

249

Up shift

Down shift

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

When you are in SequentialSportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

If you start out in second gear, thetransmission will be fixed in thatgear.

The transmission will notautomatically downshift to first geareven when the vehicle speed isunder 6 mph (10 km/h). You need toshift down to first gear manually.

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 31 mph(50 km/h)




The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 6 mph(10 km/h)

over 20 mph(32 km/h)

over 33 mph(52 km/h)


Starting in Second Gear

250

CONTINUED

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the reverselockout.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

To release the reverse lockout, makesure the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY(I) position.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

1.

2.

3.


Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter

Driving

251

COVER

NOTCH

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youmove the shift lever out of Park toneutral.

To release the reverse lockout, movethe shift lever from neutral toreverse, then to Park.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the driver’s side. Pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

6.

5.

4.


252

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving

253

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, increases wear, and reducestheir effectiveness. It also keepsyour brake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

254

CONTINUED

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

When the ABS indicator comes on,you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

Driving

255

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

326

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

256

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

With this indicator on, you will seewhich tire is losing the pressure onthe multi-information display alongwith a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message (see page ).

311

259

CONTINUED

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

257

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

To display the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button until itappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

When all tire pressures are normal,the tire pressure monitor will show a‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OK’’ message.

When any of the tires have lowpressure, the tire pressure monitorshows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE ERROR’’message.

310


Tire Pressure Monitor

258

INFO BUTTON

When any of the tires have lowpressure, the low tire pressureindicator on the instrument panelcomes on, and the multi-informationdisplay also interrupts the currentdisplay and shows a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message. You can seeone or more of the low pressure tirepositions highlighted in the displayalong with this message.

When the TPMS is functioningnormally, you can see the tirepressure readings of each tire in psi(U.S. models) or kPa (Canadianmodels) by pressing the SEL/RESET button while the multi-information display shows the tirepressure monitor.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressureindicator and message on the multi-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.


Tire Pressure Readings

Driving

259

SEL/RESET BUTTON

U.S. Canada

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe spare, the low tire pressureindicator stays on. This is normal;the system is not monitoring thespare tire pressure. Manually checkthe spare tire pressure to be sure itis correct.

If you have a flat tire, the low tireindicator and tire pressure monitorwill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the multi-information display showsa ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message.

321


Check TPMS System MessageChanging a Tire with TPMS

260

If you see this message, the tirepressure monitor shows a ‘‘SYSTEMFUNCTION ERROR’’ message. Thesystem may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.Also, the tire pressure readings willnot be displayed. Have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.





Driving

261

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When the VSA system indicatorcomes on, you will also see a‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

65

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

262

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the vehicle stabilityassist system on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

314

320

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

263

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 % of the totaltrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

264

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 % of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40 % toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

on the front axle

on the rear axle

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving

265

4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)

2,335 Ibs (1,060 kg)

2,030 Ibs (920 kg)

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment,depending on the size of your trailer,how much load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Acura equipmentwhenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and maintained,and that it meets federal, state,province, and local regulations.

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

266

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check therequirements for the areas whereyou plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Driving

267

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin first or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension,cooling system, and lights are ingood operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

264 265

311

bottom

Pre-Tow Checklist Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing a Trailer

268

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

33

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Towing a Trailer

Driving

269

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages on the multi-information display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 272....................Maintenance Minder . 274....................Maintenance Record . 284

..............................Fluid Locations . 286........................Adding Engine Oil . 287

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 289..............................Engine Coolant . 291

....................Windshield Washers . 292.......................Transmission Fluid . 293

Automatic.........................Transmission . 293

Manual.........................Transmission . 295

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 296....................Power Steering Fluid . 297

.............................................Lights . 298.......................................Seat Belts . 306.....................................Floor Mats . 306

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 307.................................Wiper Blades . 308

...........................................Wheels . 310...............................................Tires . 310

...................Checking the Battery . 316.............................Vehicle Storage . 317

361

Maintenance

Maintenance

271

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety


272

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Maintenance

273

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

－－－－－－－－－－－－

To see the current engine oil lifedisplayed on the lower segment ofthe multi-information display, turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly until engine oil life isdisplayed.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%

5% 1%0%

DisplayedEngine Oil Life

(%)100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe multi-information display to showyou when you should have yourdealer perform engine oilreplacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

274

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

CONTINUED

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 %, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance item code(s) indicatingthe main and sub items required atthe time of the oil change. Refer topage for a complete list of themaintenance main items and subitems.

When the message appears, thesystem message indicator alsocomes on (see page ). Even afteryou press the INFO button to cancelthe message, the indicator continuesto stay on until you have the serviceperformed.

To cancel the message, press theINFO button on the steering wheel.

After the message on the multi-information display is canceled bypressing the INFO button, theengine oil life display will appear inthe lower segment. You will see thepercentage of the remaining engineoil life and the maintenance itemcode(s) displayed.

75

283

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

275

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS

To cancel the engine oil life display,press the SEL/RESET button toreturn to the previous display.

The message appears on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. After canceling themessage, the engine oil life displaywill appear in the lower segment.This continues until you have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1%,the multi-information display showsa ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ message.The display also shows the samemaintenance items that werepreviously shown with ‘‘SERVICEDUE SOON.’’ Make sure you havethe indicated maintenanceperformed as soon as possible.

To cancel the message, press theINFO button on the steering wheel.To see the message again, wait foran interval for more than 5 seconds,and then press the INFO button.

After have the service is performed,make sure to reset the display asdescribed on page .277

Maintenance Minder

276

CONTINUED

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.


Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

To reset the engine oil life, pressthe INFO button on the steeringwheel to select ‘‘RESET’’ on thedisplay, and press the SEL/RESET button.

After the message on the multi-information display is canceled bypressing the INFO button, theengine oil life display will appear inthe lower segment. You will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thepercentage of the remaining engineoil life and the maintenance itemcode(s) displayed.

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the lowersegment of the multi-informationdisplay and the maintenance itemcode(s) erased the next time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If the engine oil life display is notdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly until it comes back.

1.

2.

3.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

277

‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE

If you do not complete the resetprocedure within 30 seconds afterselecting the reset mode, the modewill be canceled automatically.

If you have the required serviceperformed but do not reset thedisplay, or reset the display withoutperforming the service, the systemwill not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

To cancel resetting the oil life,press the INFO button on thesteering wheel to select‘‘CANCEL’’ on the display, andpress the SEL/RESET button.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0 %, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code(s).This message is displayed when thetotal mileage is less than 10 miles(for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0 %.

To cancel the message, press theINFO button on the steering wheel.To see the message again, wait foran interval for more than 5 seconds,and then press the INFO button.

Maintenance Minder

278

CONTINUED

Also, the percentage ‘‘0 %’’ keepsblinking on the display.


If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0 %, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total mileage after the remainingoil life became 0 %, and themaintenance item code(s).

This particular message is displayedwhen the mileage is less than 10miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0 %.

After the message on the multi-information display is canceled bypressing the INFO button, theengine oil life display will appear inthe lower segment. You will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thepercentage ‘‘0%’’ and themaintenance item code(s) displayed.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

279

CANADAU.S.

After the message on the multi-information display is canceled bypressing the INFO button, theengine oil life display will appear inthe lower segment. You will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with themaintenance item code(s), and thetotal negative mileage after the oillife becomes 0 % is displayed.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

This message is displayed when youdrive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)or 10 km (for Canadian models)after seeing the 0 % message.

Also, the total negative mileagekeeps blinking on the display.

This particular message is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0 %message.

To cancel the message, press theINFO button on the steering wheel.To see the message again, wait foran interval of more than 5 seconds,and then press the INFO button.


Maintenance Minder

280

U.S.

CANADA

＃

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions Maintenance, replacement, or

repair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance

281

－

－

－

－

－

－

－You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

234

293

234

312

298

294

296

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

282

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

283

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

NOTE:

1 :

361

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission and transfer temperatures. Thisrequires transmission and transfer fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by themaintenance minder. If you regularly drive yourvehicle under these conditions, have the transmissionand transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/Tonly.)

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

Maintenance Record

284

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Acura maintenance journal.

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

285

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Fluid Locations

286

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foras long as you own it.

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

287

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

－

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 ispreferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourvehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 0°F ( 20 °C).

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the multi-information display.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil

288

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Remove the oil drain bolt andwasher from the bottom of theengine. Drain the oil into anappropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap.

Remove the bolt located on theunderside of the body with awrench, then remove themaintenance cover.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

289

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

BOLT

MAINTENANCE COVER

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Install the maintenance cover andtighten the bolt securely.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to the filterbase. A stuck gasket could causean oil leak.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

13.

10.

Changing the Oil and Filter

290

OIL FILTER

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

4.4 US qt (4.2 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

CONTINUED

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 %antifreeze and 50 % water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

291

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

292

RADIATOR CAP

LEVEL GAUGE

Canadian models onlyIf the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on, thenshut off the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 secondsbefore going to step 2, but don’twait longer than 90 seconds.

1.

CONTINUED


Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

293

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

2.

3.

5.

4.

6.

Transmission Fluid

294

LOWER MARKUPPER MARK

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

To check the transmission fluid level,remove the two bolts, then pull theleft part of the under cover down.

After checking and adding the fluid,put the under cover back in placeand tighten the bolts securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Manual Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

295

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

BOLT

UNDER COVERBOLT

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission modelsonly)

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Brake Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid

296

MAX MIN

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Manual Transmission onlyClutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

297

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer orother qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, one on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a High Beam HeadlightBulb

Low Beam Headlight BulbReplacement

Lights

298

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the driver’s side, undo thethree fasteners and remove the airintake cover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulbsocket.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

299

FASTENER AIR INTAKE COVER

HOLD-DOWN WIRE

BULB

CONNECTOR

RUBBER WEATHER SEAL

SOCKET

Open the hood.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Make surethe bulb is installed correctly bylooking through the headlight lens.Pivot the hold-down wire back inplace, and clip the end into the slot.

Install the rubber weather sealover the back of the headlightassembly. Make sure it is rightside up; it is marked with an arrow.

Push the electrical connector ontothe socket. Make sure it isconnected securely.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

On the driver’s side, reinstall theair intake cover. Reinstall thethree fasteners and secure themby pushing on the heads until theylock.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.9.

8.

10.

7.

6. Replacing the Turn Signal LightBulb

Lights

300

BULB

SOCKET

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.


Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4.

5.2.

1.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Front Side Marker/Front Parking Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

301

HOLDING CLIPS

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.

1.

3.

2.

6.

7.

8.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

Lights

302

COVER

Open the trunk.

Pull the lining back carefully.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.To replace a bulb on the right side,

remove the trim clip. For the leftside, remove the two trim clips. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.


Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk lid seal.

Press the trim clips back into theirholes.

1.

2.

5.

6.

4.

3.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance

303

SOCKETS

BULBS

TRIM CLIPS

Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Side Turn Signal Light

Rear License Plate Bulb

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Lights

304

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

Remove the undercover fixing boltlocated under the front bumper.

Push up the undercover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Install the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Put the undercover in place.Reinstall the fixing bolt andtighten it securely.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Maintenance

305

BULB

TABFIXING BOLTUNDERCOVER

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward/rearward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensor’s ineffective.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Seat Belts Floor Mats

Seat Belts, Floor Mats

306

LOOPDriver’s floor

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchor. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

Make sure the rear floor mats areproperly hooked to the floor matanchors. Your vehicle is equippedwith front passenger’s seat weightsensors. If the rear passenger’s floormat is on the seat rail of the frontpassenger’s seat, the sensors willdetect the decreased weight on theseat, and they may not work properly.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on the multi-information display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe climate control system becomesless than usual.

Dust and Pollen Filter

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

307

Rear passenger’s floor

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade: Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

308

WIPER BLADES

TAB

BLADE ASSEMBLY

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Remove the blade from the bladeassembly:

Find the side of the bladelabeled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the sideyou pull out.Pull back the end of the bladeassembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side ofthe blade. Then grab the end ofthe blade, and slide it out.

Install the new blade onto theblade assembly:

Pull back either end of the bladeassembly.Place the side of the blade notlabeled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end ofthe blade assembly, and slidethe blade onto the assemblyuntil it is fully installed.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

309

BLADE

REINFORCEMENTWIPER BLADE

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

257

Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels

Wheels, Tires

310

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressure.

351

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront:

Rear:

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Maintenance

311

P215/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

Tires

312

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Acura wheels weights f orbalancing.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe illustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

CONTINUED

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance

313

Front

(For non-directionaltires and wheels)

(For directionaltires and wheels)

＋

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

Wheel:If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Tire:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

348

349

Snow Tires

Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

314

17 x 7 J

P215/50R17 93V

(TPMS)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Acura stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Cable-type : SCC Radial ChainCH2412T

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance

315

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified mechanic.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

316

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

317

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 320....................Changing a Flat Tire . 321

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 325................................Jump Starting . 327

............If Your Engine Overheats . 329.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 331..........Charging System Indicator . 332

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 332.......................Readiness Codes . 333

...............Brake System Indicator . 334..................Closing the Moonroof . 335

..............................................Fuses . 336..............................Fuse Locations . 339

......................Emergency Towing . 341

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

319

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

263

Compact Spare Tire

320

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

CONTINUED

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

321

TRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOLSTOOL TRAY

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool tray out of the trunk,and remove the tools and the jack.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of the trunk.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Handle the wheel nutscarefully; they may be hot fromdriving. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surface ofthe wheel facing up.

7.3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

9.


322

JACKING POINTTOOL TRAY WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

10. 13.

12.

11.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

323

BRAKE HUB

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the tooltray, and place the tool tray backin the trunk.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Refer to(see page ).

19.

20.

17.

18.

14.

15.

16.

260


Changing a Tire withTPMS

324

WING BOLT

Forsparetire

Fornormaltire

SPACER CONE

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

341

327

316

327

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

325

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).127

243

336

341

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

EmergencyTowing

Starting theEngine

326

＋

＋

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustration showthe order to connect the jumpercable.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

1.

2.3.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

327

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding pointas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

7.

6.

5.

4.

Jump Starting

328

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

341

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

329

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

7.

6. 8.

9.

10.

11.

341Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

330

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINEOIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi-information display, the oil pressurehas dropped very low or lostpressure. Serious engine damage ispossible, and you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

4.

234

287

341

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

331

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, or if you see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, or if you see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display, itmeans one of the engine’s emissionscontrol systems may have a problem.Even though you may feel nodifference in your vehicle’sperformance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause increasedemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator could come ondue to a loose or missing fuel fill cap.You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay. Tighten the cap until it clicksat least once. Tightening the cap willnot turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

332

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It takesseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

357

84

Readiness Codes

StateEmissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

333

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short

distance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. You will see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message onthe multi-information display. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

).

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display when thisindicator comes on.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

288

341Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

334

U.S. Canada

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

5.

6.

4.3.

1.

2.

340

Closing the Moonroof

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

335

SOCKETROUND PLUG

MOONROOF WRENCH

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

1.

2.

339 340

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

336

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

NOTCH TAB

CONTINUED

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Remove thescrews with a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace the fusewith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

3. 4. 5.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

337

BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window may be disabled.You should reset the AUTO feature,(see page ).

6.

201

148

Fuses

338

FUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

－

－

＋No. No.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected

12345

6789

10

111213141516171819202122

23

20 A

20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

Cooling FanNot UsedHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardVSA MotorVSAOP 1OP 2Heater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

15 A30 A10 A15 A10 A

Left Headlight LowRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight Hi

15 A7.5 A15 A20 A20 A

Right Headlight LowBack UpFI ECU (ECM/PCM)Condenser fanFR Fog Light

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

339

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

＊－

－

－

＊

No. No.Circuits Protected

No.

Amps. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

123456

789

101112

DBWIgnition CoilDaytime Running LightLAFAudio AmpInterior Light

13

1415161718192021222324252627282930313233

15 A15 A

(10 A)10 A20 A10 A

10 A20 A15 A7.5 A30 A7.5 A

Back-Up LightsDoor LockFront Accessory SocketsOPDSWiperTPMS

20 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A15 A10 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

Passenger’s Power SeatRecliningDriver’s Power Seat SlidingHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat RecliningPassenger’s Power Seat SlidingACGFuel PumpWasherMeterSRS

Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedA/CNot UsedACCNot Used

: On Canadian models

IGP (PGM-FI ECU) (ECM/PCM)

Fuse Locations

340

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

Turn off the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Manual transmission:


CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

341

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

Emergency Towing

342

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 344................................Specifications . 346

DOT Tire Quality Grading.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 349

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 349.................................Treadwear . 349

......................................Traction . 349.............................Temperature . 350

.................................Tire Labeling . 351Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 352

.......................Emissions Controls . 354.....................The Clean Air Act . 354

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 354

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 354

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 354

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 355....................PGM-FI System . 355

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 355

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 355

....................Replacement Parts . 355..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 356

..............State Emissions Testing . 357

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

343

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

344

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

345

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

346

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Capacities

1.43 US gal (5.4 )1.45 US gal (5.5 )

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)

105.1 in (2,670 mm)59.6 in (1,515 mm)59.6 in (1,515 mm)

183.3 in (4,657 mm)69.4 in (1,762 mm)57.3 in (1,456 mm)

SP-10

1.96 US gal (7.4 )1.93 US gal (7.3 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )2.1 US qt (2.0 )2.3 US qt (2.2 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. ModelsCanada Models

1

2

－

＊

－－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－＊

CONTINUED

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

347

Lights Battery

Alignment

Fuses

Engine

55 W35 W

12 V12 V

12 V12 V

3 CP21 W

12 V 55 W

Headlights

Front fog lightsFront turn signalFront parking lights/Side marker lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsRear side marker lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lights 12 V 1.1 W

2 CP12 V12 V 5 W

8 W12 V8 W12 V

12 V 3 CP3 CP12 V

12 V 21 W21 W12 V5 W12 V

12 V 21/5 W21 W12 V

Capacity 12 V 36 AH/5 HR

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights,replacement of a headlight bulb should be performed by your dealer. Toe-in

Camber

Caster 3°13’1°

0°0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

SKJ20DR-M11IZFR6K-11

10.5 : 1144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, gasoline engine

See page 340 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 339 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

NGK:DENSO:

:

Specifications

348

Tires

P215/50R17 93VT135/80D16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Front/RearSpareFrontRearSpare

－

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

349

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

350

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN. TIN is located on the sidewallof the tire.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Date of manufacture.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Max Press

Max Load

94

225

55

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number

Tire Size

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

TechnicalInform

ation

351

P215/50R17 93V

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

352

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

353

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

354

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to inject

under all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

355

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

356

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic) or neutral (manual).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

TechnicalInform

ation

357

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Stop the vehicle, turn off theignition switch, and leave it off for30 minutes.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 6th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing

358

....Customer Service Information . 360....................Warranty Coverages . 361

Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 362

.....................Authorized Manuals . 363

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

359

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraClient Services Office.

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

344

Customer Service Information

360

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2007 Acura warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2007 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

361

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

362

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００７

ＡＣＵ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

CONTINUED

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

363

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Form Description

2004-2007 Acura TSX Service Manual

2004-2007 Acura TSX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004-2007 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual

2007 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual

2007 Acura TSX Navigation

System Owner’s Manual

2007 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal

2007 Acura TSX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SEA03

61SEA03EL

61SEA30

31SEA630

31SEA800

31SEAM00

31SEAQ30

ACU-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

364

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 236ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 128............Accessory Power Sockets . 156

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 288.....................Adjusting the Sound . 175

Adjust Outside Temp....................................Display . 73, 96

........Advice For Pregnant Women . 17.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9

.....Airbag, Additional Information . 23...Additional Safety Precautions . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 34Check Airbag System

...................................Message . 83How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 33How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 31........................SRS Components . 23

............................Air Conditioning . 160.........................................Usage . 162

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 311......................................Alignment . 312

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 230Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 65, 255

.......................................Message . 83...................................Operation . 255

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 201Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 128................................Audio System . 170

................Automatic Lighting Off . 122.Automatic Seat Belt Tensionners . 21

..............Automatic Transmission . 246..........................Capacity, Fluid . 346

...............Checking Fluid Level . 293....Sequential SportShift Mode . 248

.......................................Shifting . 246.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 246

................Shift Lever Positions . 246....................Shift Lock Release . 251

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 184

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 332.......................................Message . 84

............................Jump Starting . 327..............................Maintenance . 316............................Specifications . 347

..............................Before Driving . 229..........................................Belts, Seat . 8

.........................Beverage Holders . 156..................................Booster Seats . 52

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

？

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 255

.............Break-in, New Linings . 230....................Bulb Replacement . 302

....Check ABS System Message . 83.Check Brake System Message . 84

...........................................Fluid . 296....................Fluid Low Message . 79

.......................................Parking . 151.........................System Indicator . 63.........................System Message . 84

........................Wear Indicators . 254.........Braking Fluid Low Message . 79

.............................Braking System . 254.................Brake-in, New Vehicle . 230

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 123

......................Brights, Headlights . 121Bulb Replacement

..............................Brake Lights . 302.................................Fog Lights . 304

................Front Parking Lights . 301.................................Headlights . 298

.........High-mount Brake Light . 304....................Rear License Plate . 304

............................Specifications . 347

.............Turn Signal Light . 300, 302..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 298

............................Capacities Chart . 346.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55

.............................Carrying Cargo . 238.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 194...................................CD Changer . 185

.......................CD Error Message . 193...............................Center Pocket . 155

........................Certification Label . 344............................................Chains . 315

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 321Changing Oil

........................................How to . 289......................................When to . 274

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 332.......................................Message . 84

........Check ABS System Message . 83....Check Airbag System Message . 83.....Check Brake System Message . 84

Check Charging System.......................................Message . 84

.......Check DRL System Message . 85Check Emission System

.......................................Message . 84Check Engine Oil Level

.......................................Message . 82...Check Tire Pressure Message . 259..Check TPMS System Message . 260

......Check Transmission Message . 83........Check VSA System Message . 82

............Checklist, Before Driving . 242.....................................Child Safety . 36

..............................Booster Seats . 52...................................Child Seats . 44

.....Important Safety Reminders . 36..........................................Infants . 41

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 48..........................Larger Children . 51

.........................................LATCH . 46.........................Risk with Airbag . 37

.............................Small Children . 42.........................................Tethers . 49

......Where Should a Child Sit . 37................Childproof Door Locks . 130

Index

C

II

CONTINUED

.......................................Child Seats . 36......LATCH Anchorage System . 46

...........Lower Anchorage Points . 46..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49

..............Climate Control Sensors . 169.........................Clock, Setting the . 202

...................................Clutch Fluid . 297............Cold Weather, Starting in . 243

......................Compact Spare Tire . 320.................Console Compartment . 157.................Consumer Information . 360

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 291....................................Checking . 234

.........................Proper Solution . 291...................Temperature Gauge . 68

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 354

........Cruise Control Message . 85, 204............Cruise Control Operation . 204

....................Cruise Main Indicator . 66...................................Cup Holders . 156

.............Customer Service Office . 360.......................Customized Settings . 86

....................................Default All . 90

...............Door · Window Setup . 110...........................Lighting Setup . 106

.................................Meter Setup . 93...........................Position Setup . 104

........................Setting to Default . 90...............................Wiper Setup . 117

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 122........................................Default All . 90

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 362..............Defogger, Rear Window . 124

....................................Dimensions . 346.............Dimming the Headlights . 121

Dipstick.Automatic Transmission . 293, 294

..................................Engine Oil . 234........................Directional Signals . 121

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 254.............Display, Multi-information . 69

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 290Doors

............Locking and Unlocking . 129

..................Lockout Prevention . 130...................And Trunk Open . 11, 78......................Power Door Lock . 129.......................Door Lock Mode . 111

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 349Downshifting, 6-speed Manual

.............................Transmission . 244...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.......................................Driver’s ID . 86...........................................Driving . 241

....................................Economy . 235Driving Position

........................Memory System . 142......DRL, Check System Message . 85

..........Dual Temperature Control . 167..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 307

..............................Economy, Fuel . 235.........Elap. Time Reset Condition . 100

Index

IND

EX

DD

E

III

............Emergencies on the Road . 319.............Battery, Jump Starting . 327...........Brake System Indicator . 334

................Changing a Flat Tire . 321.....Charging System Indicator . 332

..................Checking the Fuses . 336..........................Fuse Locations . 339

.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 124.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 331...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 332...Manually Closing Moonroof . 335

..................Overheated Engine . 329.......................................Towing . 341

.........................Emergency Brake . 151....................Emergency Flashers . 124

......................Emergency Towing . 341..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 136

Emission, Check System.......................................Message . 84

.......................Emissions Controls . 354.............Emissions Testing, State . 357

Engine.......Check Engine Oil Message . 82

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68.........................If It Won’t Start . 325

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 332

...................Oil Life Display . 73, 274..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 331..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 287

...............................Overheating . 329............................Specifications . 347....................Speed Limiter . 245, 251

.......................................Starting . 243Engine Speed Limiter

.............................................A/T . 245............................................M/T . 251

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 230.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 354

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 55Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 17

...................................Fan, Interior . 164.............Fasten Seat Belt Message . 78

.........................................Features . 159....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 231

Filter.........................Dust and Pollen . 307

...............................................Oil . 289...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 124

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 321.....................................Floor Mats . 306

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 293

..........................................Brake . 296.........................................Clutch . 297

..............Manual Transmission . 295..........................Power Steering . 297

......Washer Fluid Low Message . 81..................Windshield Washer . 292

.....................................Fog Lights . 122

.......................................Indicator . 66.........................Folding Rear Seat . 140........................Four-way Flashers . 124

..................................Front Airbags . 26.......................Front Wiper Action . 117

.................................................Fuel . 230...............................Cap Message . 79

......................Fill Door and Cap . 231...........................................Gauge . 68

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66..............................Low Message . 81

................Octane Requirement . 230........................Tank, Filling the . 231........................Tighten Fuel Cap . 79

..............................Fuse Locations . 339

Index

F

IV

CONTINUED

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 336

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 235.........................................Gasoline . 230...........................................Gauge . 68

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

.....................Low Fuel Message . 81................Octane Requirement . 230

........................Tank, Filling the . 231................Gas Station Procedures . 231

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68

...............................................Fuel . 68...............................Speedometer . 68

.................................Tachometer . 68GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 265Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 246..............Manual Transmission . 244

......................................Glove Box . 158

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 298........................Hands Free Link . 211

.......................................Message . 84............Hazard Warning Flashers . 124

.....................................Headlights . 121........................................Aiming . 298

............Automatic Lighting Off . 122.........................Auto Off Timer . 108

.........Daytime Running Lights . 122.................................Fog Lights . 122

..................High Beam Indicator . 66....................Lights On Indicator . 63

..........Low Beams, Turning on . 121.......................Reminder Chime . 121

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 298.................................Turning on . 121

............................Head Restraints . 139......................Safety Information . 14

...............................Heated Mirror . 146...................................Heated Seat . 137

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 243......................High Beam Indicator . 66

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 207

..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 232...........................................Horn . 4, 119

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 297

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 344Ignition

............................................Keys . 126.........................................Switch . 128

............Timing Control System . 355......................Immobilizer System . 127

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

TM

Index

IND

EX

I

G

H

V

.........................................Indicators . 61.ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) . 65

Brake (Parking and Brake....................................System) . 63

........................Charging System . 62.................................Cruise Main . 66

.....................................Fog Light . 66...................................High Beam . 66

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64.....................................Lights On . 63......................................Low Fuel . 66

........................Low Oil Pressure . 62..............Low Tire Pressure . 67, 257

Malfunction Indicator...............Lamp(MIL) . 62, 84, 332

.................Passenger Airbag Off . 33.....................Seat Belt Reminder . 62

..........................Security System . 67...........................Side Airbag Off . 64

...............................................SRS . 63.........................System Message . 66

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 65

VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist).................................Activation . 65.................................VSA System . 64

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 62...............................Infant Restraint . 41

......................................Infant Seats . 41..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49..........Information (Multi) Display . 69

....................................INFO Button . 71......................................INFO Knob . 71

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 310.................................Inside Mirror . 146

.............................Inspection, Tire . 312....................Installing a Child Seat . 45

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49.............................Using LATCH . 46............................Instrument Panel . 61

.....................................Indicators . 62......Instrument Panel Brightness . 123

...............................Interior Lights . 153.....Interior Light Dimming Time . 106

........................................Introduction . i

...................Key, Remove Message . 79Keyless Lock

....................Acknowledgement . 113................................................Keys . 126

.......................Label, Certification . 342...............Lane Change, Signaling . 121

........................Language Selection . 94

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20................................LATCH, Using . 46

.Lever, Release Parking Message . 78Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 298.......................................Indicator . 61

...........................................Setup . 106..................Turn Signal . 65, 300, 302

....................................Load Limits . 239....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 128

Locks.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 128

........................Childproof Door . 130............................Fuel Fill Door . 231

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 322.......................................Jack, Tire . 321

................................Jump Starting . 327

Index

J

K

L

VI

CONTINUED

..................................Maintenance . 271...Owner Maintenance Checks . 282

................................Main Items . 283.....................................Messages . 74

........................................Minder . 274

........................................Record . 284..........................................Safety . 272

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 332...................Manual Transmission . 244

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 295...........Memory, Driving Position . 142

.................Memory Position Link . 104

..........................Messages, System . 75...............................Meters, Gauges . 68

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 146.................................Modifications . 237

.......................................Moonroof . 150......................Closing Manually . 335

...................................Operation . 150.............Multi-Information Display . 69

..........................Change Settings . 92...................Customized Settings . 86

....................................Default All . 90

...................Neutral Gear Position . 247..................New Vehicle Break-in . 230

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 244...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 344

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 230.........................................Odometer . 72

Oil........................Change, How to . 289

......................Change, When to . 274

......................Checking Engine . 234................Level Check Message . 82

.................................Life Display . 73..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 331......................Pressure Message . 82

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 288

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 128Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 354............................Outside Mirrors . 146

.....................Outside Temperature . 73....................Overheating, Engine . 329

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 282

............Panel Brightness Control . 123........................Park Gear Position . 247

...............................Parking Brake . 151

Locks..................................Glove Box . 158

..................Lockout Prevention . 130...............................Power Door . 129

.........................................Trunk . 135........................Low Coolant Level . 234.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 244...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 331

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 346..........................Luggage, Storing . 238

Index

IND

EX

M N

O

P

VII

Parking Brake and Brake System...................................Indicator . 63

.......................................Message . 84Release Parking Lever

...................................Message . 78...............................Parking Lights . 121

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 356..................................Parking Tips . 253

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 33Passenger Side Airbag Off

..............................Indicator .32, 64.......................................Message . 82

.............................PGM-FI System . 355...................................Pollen Filter . 307

..........................Power Door Lock . 129...............Power Socket Locations . 156

............................Power Windows . 147.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 17

................Primary Disp Selection . 102.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

........................Protecting Children . 36Protecting Infants and Small

.......................................Children . 41

...........Protecting Larger Children . 51.....................Using Booster Seat . 52

...................Radiator Overheating . 329Radio/CD Sound

........................................System . 170...................Readiness Codes . 333, 357

Rear Lights,............Bulb Replacement . 302, 303

........................Rear Seat, Folding . 140..........................Rear View Mirror . 145

...............Rear Window Defogger . 124.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 138

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 244..Release Parking Lever Message . 78

.......................Reminder Indicators . 62

.....................Remote Transmitter . 131....................Remove Key Message . 79

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 289

..........................................Fuses . 336................................Light Bulbs . 298

........................................Minder . 274...........................................Tires . 313

.............................Wiper Blades . 308Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 22.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 291

...............................Restraint, Child . 36..................Reverse Gear Position . 247

...........................Reverse Lockout . 245................................Rotation, Tire . 313

........................................Safety Belts . 8............Safety Defects, Reporting . 362

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 56

..............................Safety Messages . iii...................Satellite Digital Radio . 179

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 19...............Additional Information . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

.....................................Cleaning . 306.........Fasten Seat Belt Message . 78

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

Index

R

S

VIII

CONTINUED

Seat Belts................................Maintenance . 22

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 19, 62

...................System Components . 19...............Use During Pregnancy . 17

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20..................................Seat Heaters . 137

..................Seat Position Memory . 142......................Seats, Adjusting the . 138

............................Security System . 203.......................................Indicator . 67

.................Security Relock Timer . 115.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 44

.......................Select/Reset Button . 72...............................Serial Number . 344.............................Service Manual . 363

...........Service Station Procedure . 231..........................Setting the Clock . 202

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 248.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 246

........................Shift Lock Release . 251................................Side Airbags . 9, 30

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32

..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 31How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 31Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.................Replacement in . 301, 302.............................Signaling Turns . 121

.....................................Snow Tires . 314................................Sound System . 175

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 320

............................Specifications . 348....................Specifications Charts . 346

........................Speed Limiter . 245, 251...................................Speedometer . 68

.......................................Spotlights . 153..........SRS, Additional Information . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35.............................Airbag Service . 34

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 33

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 26...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 31

........................SRS Components . 23..................................SRS Service . 34

.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 63.......................................Message . 83

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 128.......................Starting the Engine . 243

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 243

................With a Dead Battery . 327..............State Emissions Testing . 357

........Steam Coming from Engine . 329Steering Wheel

................................Adjustment . 125...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 128

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 317........................................Sun Visor . 152

........................Sunglasses Holder . 158Supplemental Restraint

..................................System . 9, 23

......................................Servicing . 34.........................SRS Indicator . 32, 63

...................System Components . 23..................................Synthetic Oil . 288

............System Message Indicator . 66

Index

IND

EX

IX

.....................................Tachometer . 68......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 303

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 319Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 349.....Emissions Control Systems . 354

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 356

.......................Temperature Gauge . 68........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 169

....................Temperature, Outside . 73..............Tether Anchorage Points . 49

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 356...........Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 79

.Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel . 125..........................Time, Setting the . 202

....................................Tire Chains . 315.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 321

.................................Tire Labeling . 351Tire Pressure Monitoring System

..................................(TPMS) . 257...Changing a Tire with TPMS . 260

Check TPMS System.................................Message . 260

Low Tire Pressure...........................Indicator . 67, 257

Required Federal............................Explanation . 352

.............Tire Pressure Monitor . 258...........Tire Pressure Readings . 259

...............................................Tires . 310..............................Air Pressure . 311

........................................Chains . 315.........................Checking Wear . 312..........................Compact Spare . 320

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 349......................................Inflation . 310

..................................Inspection . 312...................................Replacing . 313

......................................Rotating . 313...........................................Snow . 314

....................Specifications . 314, 348...................Tools, Tire Changing . 321

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 264

................Emergency Wrecker . 341....Equipment and Accessories . 266

.............................Weight Limit . 264Transmission

..........................Check Message . 83

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 293

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 295

..................Fluid Selection . 294, 295..............Identification Number . 344.............Shifting the Automatic . 246

..................Shifting the Manual . 244.....................................Treadwear . 349

Trip A & AVG. Fuel Reset with...........................................Refuel . 98

.......................................Trip Meter . 72..............................................Trunk . 135

..................Emergency Opener . 136...............................Main Switch . 136...............................Opening the . 135

..............................Open Monitor . 78............................Turn Signals . 65, 121

Unexpected, Taking Care of...............................................the . 319

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 349........................Unleaded Gasoline . 230

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 306

Index

T

U

X

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 290

................................Vanity Mirror . 152.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 239

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 346....Vehicle Identification Number . 344

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 262

............Activation Indicator . 65, 262.......................................Message . 82

..................................Off Switch . 263.................System Indicator . 64, 262

.............................Vehicle Storage . 317.................................................VIN . 344

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 288

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 56

....................Warranty Coverages . 361Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 292....................Fluid Low Message . 81

...................................Operation . 120................Wipers and Washers . 120

...........................................Wheels . 310.............Adjusting the Steering . 125............Alignment and Balance . 312

..........................Compact Spare . 320...............................Nut Wrench . 322

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 148

................Operating the Power . 147.........................Rear, Defogger . 124

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 120...................................Defroster . 165

.....................................Washers . 120Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 308...................................Operation . 120....................................Worn Tires . 312

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 341

.......................................XM Radio . 179

.................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

Index

IND

EX

V

X

Y

W

XI

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

6-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

2.1 US qt (2.0 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Premium grade 5W-30detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )Compact Spare Tire:

285

292

293

295

294

Documents

2007 Acura TSX Online Reference Owner's Manualtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0707OM/enu/TS0707OM.… · 2007 Acura TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and